Samsung | LA52F71B | Samsung LA52F71B دليل المستخدم

‫‪LCD TV‬‬
‫‪LA52F7‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ www.samsung.com/global/register‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;26;56‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!2‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ‪ LCD‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ "ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﺮ‪" ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ" ﻭ "ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪© 2006 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;19‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!3‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‪...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ‪..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪..................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪....................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪......................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ‪.....................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻙ ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪...................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ‪................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺰء ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﻲ‪......................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ‪....................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ‪................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪..........................................(PIP‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‪......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ ‪.............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪..............................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪.......‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ‪......................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪.......................................................‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ‪...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ ‪.............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪...................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺁﺑﻲ ‪...........................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪..........................................‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‪.....................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‪..............................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Fastext‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‪............‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺎﻥ‪.............................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪...............................................‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪٣١ ..........(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪٣١ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٣٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ‪٣٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪٣٣ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ‪٣۴ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ‪١٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ‪٢٠ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ‪٢٠ ....................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;21‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻗﻼﻣﻲ ﻛﺴﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(AAA x٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺒﺖ )ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪Samsung ،‬‬
‫‪ Electronics‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺵ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;26‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;3‬‬
‫ﻛﻨ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪ ،Component٢، S-Video ،Component١، AV٢، TV ،AV١‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪(HDMI٢، HDMI١ ،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ۵‬ﻭ‪ ۶‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪(Power‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٣-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;47‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;4‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪۴-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;55‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;5‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ /‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪(HDMI/DVI IN 1, HDMI IN2) HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AV‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪) HDMI‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ AV‬ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ HDMI‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ« ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ 5.1‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ DVI‬ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪)HDCP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪–DVI‬ﺑﻪ‪ HDMI-‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ DVI-HDMI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ "‪ "R - AUDIO - L‬ﺩﺭ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺖ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﻛﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﭘﺎﺷﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ DVI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪Component‬‬
‫‪480i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪480p‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪576i‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪576p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪1080p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ(‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ A/V‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪(AV IN 1‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ A/V‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ "‪ "R - AUDIO - L‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ A/V‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ S-VIDEO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ "‪ "R - AUDIO - L‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ A/V‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ )‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SERVICE‬‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ "‪ "R - AUDIO - L‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﭙﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) D- Sub‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ")‪ "PC (PC IN‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ")‪ "AUDIO (PC IN‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ "‪ "Audio Out‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ )‪(DTV/DVD‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺰء )"‪ ("PR", "PB", "Y‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻱ ﺗﻲ ﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ‬‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻱ ﺗﻲ ﻭﻱ )ﻳﺎ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻱ ﺗﻲ ﻭﻱ )ﻳﺎ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ( ﻭ ﺩﻱ ﺗﻲ ﻭﻱ )ﻳﺎ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺰء‬‫)"‪ ("PR","PB","Y‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ PR، PB‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺷﻤﺎ )ﺩﻱ ﺗﻲ ﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ(‪ Y،B-Y ،‬ﻭ ‪ R-Y‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Y، Cb‬ﻭ ‪ Cr‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪) RCA‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ "‪ "R - AUDIO - L‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ DTV‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 1080p‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ LCD‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 1080p‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺴﻴﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺴﻴﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ )ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ( ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪۵-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;27;62‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;6‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ : P‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫‪: P‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ‪OSD‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪(TV، DVD، STB، CABLE، VCR‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۶‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ‪/‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫"ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪/‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(Rewind، Stop ، Play/Pause، Fast/Forward‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻭ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ )‪(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪SRS TSXT‬‬
‫‪ : P‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫‪ ۵ :SET‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ –‬
‫‪ : P‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،STB ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : RESET‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺑﺎً ‪>Teletext‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ<‪Double ،‬‬
‫"‪ "RESET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫>ﺩﻭﺑﻞ< ﻳﺎ ‪>Mix‬ﻣﻴﻜﺲ< ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Fastext‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ‪ (MUTE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺐ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ AAA‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ "‪ "+‬ﻭ "–" ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻔﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻬﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪۶-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;28;11‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;7‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (9~0‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TV‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻏﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (9~0‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ) ‪ ( /‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻰﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "‪ "Start Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ "‪ "OK‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "‪ "Shop‬ﻭﻳﺎ "‪ "Home‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Start Plug & Play‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﺞ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻮﻳﺎﺧﺎﻧﻪ< ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "‪ ".Check antenna input‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ "ﻗﺒﻮﻝ" ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ" ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ "ﺷﺮﻭﻉ" ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪" ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ"‪" ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ" ﻳﺎ "‪ "am/pm‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪" ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ"‪" ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ" ﻳﺎ "‪ "am/pm‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪ :‬ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٧-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;28;45‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;8‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‪:‬‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "‪ "Plug & Play‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ "ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ "Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٨-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;28;59‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;9‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪)C‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ( ﻭﻳﺎ ‪)S‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪) P :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‪) C ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ(‪) S ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ(‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻗﺒﻮﻝ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١١‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺗﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫"ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪1/10‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪C--‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪BBC1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C74‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C75‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪C76‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪S3‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٥‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪S4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪S6‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪S7‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ "‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ "‬
‫" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﺩ‬
‫" ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CH MGR‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٩-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;28;66‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;:‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫"ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻂ "‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪C--‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C74‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C75‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٧‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻠﺶ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪C76‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪S3‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪S4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪S6‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪S7‬‬
‫"ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ "ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ" ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ "‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫" ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪BBC1‬‬
‫‪1/10‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪BBC1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪C--‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C74‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C75‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻚﺭﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٠-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;14‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;21‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪C--‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C74‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C75‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ )‪ / (A~Z‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ )‪ / (9~0‬ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪ ،-‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ(‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺏﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫"ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ" ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻙ "*" ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ‪" ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١١-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;21‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;22‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫"ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪Colour Manager‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﺒﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ P.MODE‬ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ" ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺥﺍﻧﻪ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٣‬ﻡﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻥﻇﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪Colour Manager‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ )ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ :(NTSC‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ "ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ" ‪" ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ" ﻭ "ﺭﻧﮓ" ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٢-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;26‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;23‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪Colour Manager‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺵﻣﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻦﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ :١‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ :٢‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫"ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ "١1‬ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﮔﺮﻡ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪ :٢‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫"ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪ "١‬ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪ :١‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺰء ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "‪ "Colour Manager‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Colour Manager‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪R‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪G‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪B‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪R‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪G‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪B‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪ :R‬ﺟﺰء ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪ :G‬ﺟﺰء ﺳﺒﺰ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‪ :B‬ﺟﺰء ﺁﺑﻲ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ :R‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ :G‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰء ﺳﺒﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‪ :B‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﺰء ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ "ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ "‪ "Colour Manager‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٣-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;36‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;24‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪ 50‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫‪Colour Manager‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ" ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪>Reset‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ< ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫‪WIDE 4:3‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :16:9‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :WIDE 4:3‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) 16:9‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4:3‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "‪ "16:9‬ﻭ "‪"4:3‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ : WIDE 4:3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ P.SIZE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ STILL‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١۴-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;43‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;25‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫"ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪) DNIe‬ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺁﻟﮕﺮﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ‬
‫‪ DNIe‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ DNIe‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ DNIe‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪DNIe‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ "DNIe‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ DNIe‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ‪ DNIe‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ DNle‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١۵-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;55‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;26‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ "‪ "16:9‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺿﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﺍﺳﺖ‪" ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PIP‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ "‪ "PIP‬ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ" ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﺍﺳﺖ‪" ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ" ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻮﻛﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺿﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ PIP: O) PIP‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ PIP: X ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪Sub‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪Main‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١۶-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;61‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;27‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ" ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ‪ :‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ‪ :‬ﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ S.MODE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪L/R‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ"‬
‫‪1kHz 300Hz 100Hz‬‬
‫‪3kHz‬‬
‫‪10kHz‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺍﮐﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ "‪>"Custom‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ< ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ‪ 5.1‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﺎﻣ ﹰﻼ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪.SRS Labs, Inc‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT، SRS‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ TruSurround XT technology .‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٧-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;29;69‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;28‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫"ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ "ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ" "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫"ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ" )ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪ ،PIP‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻓﺮﻋﯽ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ"‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ "ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٨-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;2:;22‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;29‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ" ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﺪﺍ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺍﮔﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ" "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ "ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ" ﻭ‬
‫"ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ" )ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ "ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ" ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ "‪ ،"DUAL‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫‪FM Stereo‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪١ DUAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪NICAM Stereo‬‬
‫‪٢/١ DUAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫‪Automatic‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫‪change‬‬
‫‪٢ DUAL‬‬
‫‪١ DUAL‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫‪STEREO‬‬
‫‪DUAL‬‬
‫‪MONO‬‬
‫‪١ MONO‬‬
‫‪٢ DUAL‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DUAL‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Automatic‬‬
‫‪change‬‬
‫‪١ DUAL‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Mono‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺯﻣﺎﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ "ﺳﺎﻋﺖ"‪" ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ" ﻳﺎ "‪ "am/pm‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬
‫"ﺳﺎﻋﺖ"‪" ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ" ﻳﺎ "‪ "am/pm‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪١٩-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;2:;2:‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;2:‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮﻯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ"‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫‪150‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺯﻣﺎﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺯﻣﺎﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫)ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ .(180 ،150 ،120 ،90 ،60 ،30 ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ‪ 0‬ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SLEEP‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺮﺭﺍً ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ"‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺯﻣﺎﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ "ﺳﺎﻋﺖ" ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ "ﺳﺎﻋﺖ" ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ">ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ< ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ "ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی" ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ "ﺑﻠﻪ" ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢٠-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;2:;45‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;31‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺯﺑﺎﻥ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪!中国语‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ‪ PlayStationTM‬ﻳﺎ ‪ XboxTM‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ"‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺍﻻﻳﺰﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢١-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;2:;54‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;32‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫" ﺭﺍ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ" ﻳﺎ "ﻣﻠﻮﺩی" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺐ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی" ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ "ﻋﺎﻟﯽ"‬
‫ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ‪ LED‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪>Blue Eye TV‬ﭼﺸﻢ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ< ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ LED ،‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "‪ "Blue Eye‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫‪Blue Eye‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺭﻭﺷﻦ" ﻳﺎ "ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪)LED :‬ﺁﺑﻲ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪)LED :‬ﺁﺑﻲ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢٢-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;2:;66‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;33‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻭﺭﻭﺩی"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ "ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ" ﺩﺭ "ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ" ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫"‪" ،"AV1"، "AV2"، "S-Video"، "Component1"، "Component2‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‪"HDMI1"، "HDMI2" ،‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪----‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ،TV‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (9~0‬ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ / P‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PC‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪>PC‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ<‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ "ﻭﺭﻭﺩی"‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ "ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎ" ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪--‬‬‫‪---‬‬‫‪ ---‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪VCD/‬‬‫‪DVD ---‬‬‫‪D-VHS ---‬‬‫‪ ---‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ‬‫‪HD STB ---‬‬‫‪ ---‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬‫‪----‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢٣-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;13‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;34‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ "ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ" ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﻟﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﺸﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺶ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪P‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TTX/MIX‬‬
‫)‬
‫( ﻳﺎ ‪P‬‬
‫)‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)MENU‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TTX/MIX‬‬
‫( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ”‪“Teletext”، “Double‬ﻭ ”‪ “Mix‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TV‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ"‬
‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ "ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ" ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢۴-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;26‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;35‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( )PIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ( )PIP‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫ﺴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬
‫‪)TTX/MIX‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪)INFO‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪)INFO‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﺵ‬
‫‪)PRE-CH‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫)‬
‫)‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫‪)P.MODE‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Fastext‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TTX/MIX‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ) ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪)TV‬‬
‫( ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢۵-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;38‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;36‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﭻ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ VCR‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٨‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠٨٠‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪VCR :‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪ “VCR‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CABLE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٩‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠۴۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪Cable box :‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪ “CABLE‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٢۶-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;56‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;37‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DVD‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴٠~٣٩‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١۴١‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ DVD :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪ “DVD‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ STB‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ STB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SET‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ‪ STB‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ”‪ “٠‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ STB ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٣ ،٢‬ﻭ ‪ ۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ‪ STB‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٠٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٠٧۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪STB :‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ”‪ “STB‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪٢٧-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;62‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;38‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
VCR
Code
079 078 077 005 004 003 002 001 000
020
Brand
SAMSUNG
ADMIRAL
025
032 027 004
026 007
018
022
055 015 008 006 003 002
056 021
055 015 008 006 003 002
007
024 002
066 064 056 025 021 017 008 007 002
016 015 014 013 012 011 010 003
026 007
017
025
034
047 040 034 032 030 025 022 021 006 003 001
073 069 067 066 065 063 060 052 050
061 051 048 029 028 024 018
025
056 021 017 005 002
002
007
074 042 041 025 019
021
056 054 041 037 026 021 019 018 007 002
037 026 021 018 008 007
083 082 081
037 026 021 018 008 007
070
036
010 009 008 007 006
025
038
025
059 056 021
062 037 026 021 018 008 007
006
021
025 024 021 006
034
005
075 041 019
046 041 034 019
AIWA
AKAI
AUDIO DYNAMICS
BELL&HOWELL
BROKSONIC
CANDLE
CANON
CITIZEN
Colour TYME
CRAIG
CURTIS MATHES
DAEWOO
DB
DIMENSIA
DYNATECH
ELECTROHOME
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GENERAL ELECTRIC
GO VIDEO
HARMAN KARDON
HITACHI
INSTANT REPLAY
JC PENNEY
JCL
JVC
KENWOOD
KLH
KONIA
LG(Goldstar)
LIOYD
LOGIK
LXI
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MARTA
MEI
MEMOREX
MGA
MIDLAND
MINOLTA
MITSUBISHI
Code
020
025 002
038 025 005 002
064 062 037 026 018 008 007
020
076 075 074 073
072 071 056 021
075 041 019
008
059 056 021
080 021
053 039 026 019
055 049 015
017
018
056 021
056 048 034 029 025 024 021 020 018 006
076 068 057 043 041 035 021 019 017 002
026
024 018
067 052 047 003
051 048 041 029 028 024 019 018 006
015 045 034 020
058 038 033 027
025
044 033 027
059 056 025 021
025
025 018
006
037
068 037 025
021
031 025 021 006
066
052 051 029 019 003
006 002
002
026 007
026
026 007
002
041 038 034 025 024 021 020 019 006 003 002
037 026 018 008 007
033 027 023
Brand
MONTGOMERY WARD
MTC
MULTITECH
NEC
OPTIMUS
ORION
PANASONIC
PENTAX
+PENTEX RESEARCH
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
PORTLAND
PROSCAN
QUARTZ
QUASAR
RADIO SHACK/
REALISTIC
RCA
SANSUI
SANYO
SCOTT
SEARS
SHARP
SHIMTOM
SIGNATURE
SONY
SYLVANIA
SYMPHONIC
TANDY
TASHIKA
TATUNG
TEAC
TECHNICS
TEKNIKA
TMK
TOSHIBA
TOTEVISION
UNITECH
VECTOR RESEARCH
VICTOR
VIDEO CONCEPTS
VIDEOSONIC
WARDS
YAMAHA
ZENITH
٢٨-‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‬
CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;39
3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;68
CABLE BOX
Code
007 006 005 004 003 002 001 000
041
031 024 003
030 025
039 038
Brand
SAMSUNG
GI
HAMLIN
HITACHI
JERROLD
030 025
028 023 019
026
044 037 027 022 003
028 023 021 019
044 020 018 004
040 022 014
003
MACOM
MAGNAVOX
OAK
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
REGAL
Code
015 023
042 043
042 043
022
036
Brand
REGENCY
SA
SCIENTIFIC ATLAN
SPRUCER
STARGATE 2000
016
016
032
033 034
019 021 023 028
046
017 029 035 037 045
SYLVANIA
TEXSCAN
TOCOM
UNIVERSAL
VIEWSTAR
WARNER AMEX
ZENITH
SAMSUNG DVD
Code
002 001 000
004 003
006 005
011 010 009 008 007
012
013
Product
DVD
DVDR
BD Record
VCR COMBO
VCR Record
DHR COMBO
Code
016 015 014
017
018
019
020
021
Product
Home Theater VCR COMBO
HDD Recorder COMBO
TWIN TRAY COMBO
STB DVD COMBO
DVD Receiver
AV Receiver
Code
030
075
085
072
Brand
ANAM
AUDIOVOX
AUDIOLOGIC
ANABA
Code
092
091
116 115 033 022
073
Brand
INTEGRA
JBL
JVC
JATON
112 111 088 084 083 086 074 071 070
114
062
074
123 122
027
082 079 078 077
125 080
081
065
095
066
146
068 067
090
060
135 133 089 061
074 069
074
113 064
071
073
110 091
089
APEX DIGITAL
AIWA
BROKSONIC
BLAUPUNKT
B&K
CURTIS MATHES
CYBER HOME
CLARION
CIRRUS
CYBER HOME
CINEVISION
DAEWOO
DENON
FARENHEIT
FISHER
GPX
GO VIDEO
GE
GREENHILL
HITACHI
HITEKER
HOYO
HARMAN / KARDON
IRT
109 108 051
073
107 106 100 059
075 074
031 025
057
058
054
055
056
093 076
094 074
073
050 049 048
052
053
144
074
105
072
119 092 076
045 044
047 046
023
KENWOOD
KISS
KONKA
KLH
LG(Goldstar)
LOEWE
LASONIC
MOBILE AUTHORITY
MEMOREX
MALATA
MAGNAVOX
MINTEK
MONYKA
NORCENT
NEXT BASE
NEC
NANTAUS
NESA
OPTOMEDIA ELECTRONICS
OPTIVIEW
ONKYO
PHILCO
PRINCETON
PROSCAN
DVD
٢٩-‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‬
CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;3:
3117.21.2:!!!!5;31;6:
DVD
Code
138 137 136 134 124 034 024
076 036
118 117
120
132 131 075 074 035 023
073
038
104
141 130 129 128 127 126 029 026
041 039
042
093 043
140
062
090 062
094
Brand
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
ROTEL
RIO
RCA
RAITE
ROWA
SAMPO
SONY
SHERWOOD
SVA
SYLVANIA
SHARP
SANSUI
SANYO
SHINSONIC
Code
145
076 062 028
139
072
073
096
097
101 099 098
076
075
102
063 032
073 040
103
121 076
Brand
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
TECHNICS
TVIEW
TOKAI
TEAC
TECHWOOD
TREDEX
URBAN CONCEPTS
VENTURER
VOCOPRO
YAMAHA
YAMAKAWA
XWAVE
ZENITH
SAMSUNG SET-TOP BOX
Product
Ground wave STB
Satellite STB
CABLE STB
STB DVD COMBO
Satellite STB HDD COMBO Standard
Code
002 001
003
004
008
009
Product
Satellite STB HDD COMBO Premium
CABLE STB HDD COMBO Standard
CABLE STB HDD COMBO Premium
Ground wave STB HDD COMBO Standard
Ground wave STB HDD COMBO Premium
Code
010
011
012
013
014
SET-TOP BOX
Code
023
043
034 018
019
035
065 062 061 060 045 022 019 017 016 015
068 067 066
074
070 069
069
032 024 018
027
071 070 069 025
069
069
065
064 063 048 047 046
069
056
022
017 015
020
020
059
063
070 069
073 044
Brand
ALPHASTAR
ANAM
CHANNEL MASTER
CROSSDIGITAL
CHAPARRAL
DIRECT TV
DAEWOO
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
DISHPRO
DRAKE
DX ANTENNA
ECHOSTAR
EXPRESSVU
GOI
GE
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
HTS
HOME CABLE
HITACHI
HUGHES NETWORK
IQ
IQ PRISM
JANEIL
JERROID
JVC
LG(Goldstar)
Brand
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
MOTOROLA
MACOM
MITSUBISHI
NEXT LEVEL
PHILIPS
PRIMESTAR
PANASONIC
PAYSAT
PROSCAN
RCA
RADIOSHACK
REALISTIC
STAR TRAK
STS
SKY
SKY LIFE
SHACK
STAR CHOICE
SONY
TOSHIBA
ULTIMATE TV
UNIDEN
ZENITH
Code
042 041 040 039 038 036 021 016
016
064
018
015
064 048 047
041 040 039 038 036 033 021 017 016 015
067 042
063 050 049 046
062 061 059 058
016
066 065
066 065 053 052 051
064
057
026
027 020
031
007 006 005
064
064
060 054
072 030 029 028 017 015
066 060
057 056 055 037 021 016
068 031 024
٣٠-‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‬
CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;41
3117.21.2:!!!!5;32;14
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ”‪ “Control Panel‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ”‪“Appearance and Themes‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ”‪ “Settings‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ‪ Display‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ(‪ :‬ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ‪1920X1080 -‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ display‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫”‪ “60‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ "‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ" ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ”‪ “OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ )‪(H/V‬‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪640 X 350‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪720 x 400‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪28.322‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪640 X 480‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪800 x 600‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1024 x 768‬‬
‫‪1152 x 864‬‬
‫‪1280 x 960‬‬
‫‪1280 x 1024‬‬
‫‪1280 x 1024‬‬
‫‪1280 x 1024‬‬
‫‪1280 x 1024‬‬
‫‪1600 x 1200‬‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪35.000‬‬
‫‪37.861‬‬
‫‪37.500‬‬
‫‪35.156‬‬
‫‪43.750‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.077‬‬
‫‪46.875‬‬
‫‪57.672‬‬
‫‪48.364‬‬
‫‪56.476‬‬
‫‪60.023‬‬
‫‪67.500‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪63.981‬‬
‫‪74.620‬‬
‫‪76.824‬‬
‫‪79.976‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪66.587‬‬
‫‪70.000‬‬
‫‪72.809‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪56.250‬‬
‫‪70.000‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪72.188‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪72.000‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪70.069‬‬
‫‪75.029‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪60.020‬‬
‫‪70.000‬‬
‫‪72.000‬‬
‫‪75.025‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪59.934‬‬
‫‪28.560‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪36.000‬‬
‫‪45.500‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪50.000‬‬
‫‪49.500‬‬
‫‪78.434‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪78.750‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪128.943‬‬
‫‪132.752‬‬
‫‪135.000‬‬
‫‪162.000‬‬
‫‪138.500‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+ /+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/-‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ SOG .‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ‪ 1920x1080‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺭﺍﻧﺸﮕﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ )ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ‪ 1920x1080‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٣١-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;54;39‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;42‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺮﻓ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ)‪ (coarse‬ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ :‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ“ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪.۵‬‬
‫‪.۶‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”‪ “Coarse‬ﻭﻳﺎ ”‪ “Fine‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ PC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Coarse‬‬
‫‪Fine‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ”ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻨﻆﻳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(" ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ“ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ(‪:‬‬
‫‪> Auto adjustment‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ< ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻍﻳﺮﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(" ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ“ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪" ٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻍﻳﺮﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(" ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٣٢-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;32;24‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;43‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺴﻴﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ (1‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ )ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪.(2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪2‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﺊ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ<‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﺰﻳﻨﮕﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ "ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ" ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻰﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ”‪>“.Check signal cable‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ <.‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ”‪Mode Not‬‬
‫‪">“.Supported‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‪ <".‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪ (3,147,264‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٣٣-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;32;52‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;44‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫‪LA52F7‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫‪ 52‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪310 W‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫‪1920 × 1080 @ 60 Hz‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪10 W x 2‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ‪x‬ﻋﻤﻖ‪x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪1281 x 113 x 823 mm‬‬
‫‪1281 x 326 x 879 mm‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ 42.6‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 104‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ -20‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 45‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ -4‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 113‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ )ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫˚‪-20˚ ~ 20‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‪٣۴-‬‬
‫‪3117.21.2:!!!!5;32;57‬‬
‫‪CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;45‬‬
‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE ‫ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬،‫ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬Samsung ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG
Country
Customer Care Center
Web Site
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 7267864 (SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com/za
U.A.E
800SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/mea
BN68-01117Y-01
CO79.12228Z.12Qfs/joee!!!Tfd3;46
3117.21.2:!!!!5;32;61
Download PDF

advertising